Upload
hoangtruc
View
216
Download
2
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
GCSE Options 201617
EASTBARNETSCHOOL ldquoI want to learnrdquo
East
Bar
net S
choo
l KS4
Cur
ricul
um
At East Barnet School we seek to give every student the best possible educational experience We wish all students to achieve excellent results and be inspired by the learning that goes on in their lessons In order to help us achieve this students must give very careful consideration to the advice they will receive in the next few months regarding their GCSE options
The Curriculum throughout the first three years of secondary education is fixed for all students with no element of choice However at KS4 students are able to choose many of the courses they wish to pursue with a core of subjects remainingcompulsory Thus students are involved in creating a far more individual timetable to suit their interests and strengths
It is important that students study a broad and balanced curriculum The English Baccalaureate is recognized by the Government as an important indicator of success This means that students need to achieve a good grade in English Maths Science a Modern Foreign Language and History or Geography Our options procedure is designed so that students will make choices that will enable them to achieve this qualification
All the courses are delivered by staff who are experts in their own particular subject areas and who have consistently managed to get the best out of their students The Year 9 subject teachers know the students in their classes and will offer help and guidance to assist them in making their choices wisely Mr Iordanou (Assistant Headteacher) will also provide much valuable advice
As students enter KS4 we would expect them to become increasingly mature in their attitude and approach towards their studies The demands of their GCSE courses are considerable and students will need to organise their time and work in a responsible and mature manner in preparation for non-examined assessments (coursework) and examinations Good attendance and punctuality will be a key factor as it will become increasingly important to be present for all lessons
We are proud of the standards achieved by students at KS4 and expect that current Year 9 students will be even more successful than their predecessors
N ChristouHeadteacher
East Barnet School KS4 Curriculum
The Options Process03 Changes to the Curriculum - 2016 Onwards04 The Options Process Explained05 The Curriculum for Key Stage 406 How to Make Your Choices
Compulsory07 English amp English Literature08 Mathematics09 Physical Education (core)10 Religious Studies11 Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Compulsory with an Element of Choice12 Science14 Humanities16 Modern Foreign Languages17 Technology
Options22 Expressive Arts26 Computing28 Social Sciences
General Information31 lsquoI want to learnrsquo Culture32 Non Examined Assessments amp Homework
Cont
ents
Changes to the Curriculum - 2016 OnwardsAs you may have heard there have been a number of changes in education which will impact on the way our students are to be taught and assessed over the next few years Some of these are being brought in over a period of time but some will impact on our current Year 9 students We will continue to provide the very highest quality teaching so that our students are able to perform to their very best in their GCSEs but a summary of the key changes affecting your child are outlined below
Key changes
1 For the majority of subjects students will now be graded using the new grading scale that uses numbers 1 (lowest) to 9 (highest) which will now replace the old grading system of A to G
2 In English and Maths students will now be assessed only by examination This lsquolinearrsquo assessment started in September 2015 and means that all Year 9 students will sit their GCSE exams at the end of the course For current Year 9 students this will mean sitting exams in May June 2018 Year 9 students will not have coursework in English (currently called lsquoControlled Assessmentsrsquo) but will be assessed at the very end of the course by examinations
There are various other changes which are subject specific and these are outlined on the subject specific page in this booklet If you have any queries do not hesitate to contact the relevant department and they will be happy to help
Chan
ges t
o th
e Cur
ricul
um
03
The O
ptio
ns P
roce
ss E
xpla
ined
The Options Process ExplainedThis booklet is designed to guide and assist both students and parents in the choices that they now face as students come to the end of Key Stage 3 and look ahead to starting their GCSE courses The choices that are made affect the subjects that students will spend their time studying for the next two years The success of students in these courses will have an important effect on the opportunities that will be open to them for the rest of their lives We wish to seeall students succeed and excel in the subjects that they enjoy and are stimulated by with a reminder that the culture we seek to create throughout the school is embodied by our mottolsquoI want to learnrsquo
Overview of key datesFriday Assembly time Heads of Faculty to explain courses on offer each week
Thursday 10th March Information evening for parents and students
Tuesday 22nd March 9 ABCD Consultation Evening
Tuesday 29th March 9 EFGH Consultation Evening
By Thursday 31st March Subject Option forms returned to Form Tutors
May ndash July Options interviews with Mr Iordanou (Assistant Headteacher)
Confirmation of individual student options will be completed by end of the Summer Term
We will always seek to give students the subjects that they wish to study However it may be necessary at times to negotiate and discuss with students which courses it would be appropriate for them to study We will involve parents as fully as possible in these discussions If there are any questions then please do not hesitate to contact Mr Iordanou
04
The C
urric
ulum
for K
ey S
tage
4
05
The Curriculum for Key Stage 4All students should follow courses in English Mathematics Science Technology a Modern Foreign Language Humanities Religious Studies and Physical Education They will also study Citizenship and Personal Social Health and Economics Education (PSHEE) and will have experience of Information Technology which is co-ordinated across a variety of subjects In addition they must choose from a wide range of optional subjects These are explained below
OptionsIf you have chosen Combined Science you can pick any 2 subjects from Group 5
If you have chosen Separate Sciences you pick just 1 subject from Group 5
Group 5ArtMusicDramaPE
Digital ApplicationsComputer Science
GeographyHistory
FrenchGermanSpanish
Business StudiesHealth amp Social CareSociology
EngineeringFood Prep amp NutritionGraphic ProductsProduct DesignTextiles Technology
Compulsory with an Element of ChoiceYou must pick one subject from each Group
Group 1Sciences
Core +Combined Science
ORSeparate Sciences
Group 2Humanities
GeographyOR
History
Group 3Languages
FrenchOR
GermanOR
Spanish
Group 4Technology
EngineeringOR
Food Prep amp NutritionOR
Graphic ProductsOR
Product DesignOR
Textiles Technology
CompulsoryThese are subjects you have to take
MathematicsEnglish amp English Literature
Physical Education (core)
(non GCSE)
ReligiousStudies
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
(non GCSE)
Start Here
Step 1
Step 2
How
to M
ake Y
our C
hoice
s Core SubjectsIt is compulsory for all students to study English Mathematics and Science in Key Stage4 Students in Year 10 and 11 are divided into two half year groups each of which containsthe same spread of ability In each of these subjects there will be several sets composed ofstudents who are expected to achieve the highest grades
Decisions about groups in English Mathematics and Science are made by the respective departments and any questions relating to this can be asked at the forthcoming consultation evening
Optional Subjectsbull When making your choices the subject to start with is Science All students will take either
Core + Combined Science (two GCSE subjects) or Separate Sciences (separate subjects in Physics Chemistry and Biology) Both alternatives have positive advantages
Choosing Separate Sciences will increase the amount of time spent on each Science but limits the number of optional subjects which can be chosen
Before any choice is made it is important to seek advice from the studentrsquos Science Teacher at the forthcoming consultation evening
bull The next step is to choose a subject from the Humanities block (Group 2) a subject from the Modern Foreign Languages block (Group 3) and a subject from the Technology block (Group 4)
The choice of Modern Foreign Language will depend on what the student studies in Year 9 For advice please speak to the appropriate Modern Foreign Languages Teacher
bull The final step is to choose subjects from Group 5 to make up seven options This will depend on the choice of Science subject ie
If Combined Science is chosen two subjects must be chosen from Group 5If Separate Sciences are chosen one subject must be chosen from Group 5
In addition all students follow courses in PE PSHEE and Religious Studies
06
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
East
Bar
net S
choo
l KS4
Cur
ricul
um
At East Barnet School we seek to give every student the best possible educational experience We wish all students to achieve excellent results and be inspired by the learning that goes on in their lessons In order to help us achieve this students must give very careful consideration to the advice they will receive in the next few months regarding their GCSE options
The Curriculum throughout the first three years of secondary education is fixed for all students with no element of choice However at KS4 students are able to choose many of the courses they wish to pursue with a core of subjects remainingcompulsory Thus students are involved in creating a far more individual timetable to suit their interests and strengths
It is important that students study a broad and balanced curriculum The English Baccalaureate is recognized by the Government as an important indicator of success This means that students need to achieve a good grade in English Maths Science a Modern Foreign Language and History or Geography Our options procedure is designed so that students will make choices that will enable them to achieve this qualification
All the courses are delivered by staff who are experts in their own particular subject areas and who have consistently managed to get the best out of their students The Year 9 subject teachers know the students in their classes and will offer help and guidance to assist them in making their choices wisely Mr Iordanou (Assistant Headteacher) will also provide much valuable advice
As students enter KS4 we would expect them to become increasingly mature in their attitude and approach towards their studies The demands of their GCSE courses are considerable and students will need to organise their time and work in a responsible and mature manner in preparation for non-examined assessments (coursework) and examinations Good attendance and punctuality will be a key factor as it will become increasingly important to be present for all lessons
We are proud of the standards achieved by students at KS4 and expect that current Year 9 students will be even more successful than their predecessors
N ChristouHeadteacher
East Barnet School KS4 Curriculum
The Options Process03 Changes to the Curriculum - 2016 Onwards04 The Options Process Explained05 The Curriculum for Key Stage 406 How to Make Your Choices
Compulsory07 English amp English Literature08 Mathematics09 Physical Education (core)10 Religious Studies11 Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Compulsory with an Element of Choice12 Science14 Humanities16 Modern Foreign Languages17 Technology
Options22 Expressive Arts26 Computing28 Social Sciences
General Information31 lsquoI want to learnrsquo Culture32 Non Examined Assessments amp Homework
Cont
ents
Changes to the Curriculum - 2016 OnwardsAs you may have heard there have been a number of changes in education which will impact on the way our students are to be taught and assessed over the next few years Some of these are being brought in over a period of time but some will impact on our current Year 9 students We will continue to provide the very highest quality teaching so that our students are able to perform to their very best in their GCSEs but a summary of the key changes affecting your child are outlined below
Key changes
1 For the majority of subjects students will now be graded using the new grading scale that uses numbers 1 (lowest) to 9 (highest) which will now replace the old grading system of A to G
2 In English and Maths students will now be assessed only by examination This lsquolinearrsquo assessment started in September 2015 and means that all Year 9 students will sit their GCSE exams at the end of the course For current Year 9 students this will mean sitting exams in May June 2018 Year 9 students will not have coursework in English (currently called lsquoControlled Assessmentsrsquo) but will be assessed at the very end of the course by examinations
There are various other changes which are subject specific and these are outlined on the subject specific page in this booklet If you have any queries do not hesitate to contact the relevant department and they will be happy to help
Chan
ges t
o th
e Cur
ricul
um
03
The O
ptio
ns P
roce
ss E
xpla
ined
The Options Process ExplainedThis booklet is designed to guide and assist both students and parents in the choices that they now face as students come to the end of Key Stage 3 and look ahead to starting their GCSE courses The choices that are made affect the subjects that students will spend their time studying for the next two years The success of students in these courses will have an important effect on the opportunities that will be open to them for the rest of their lives We wish to seeall students succeed and excel in the subjects that they enjoy and are stimulated by with a reminder that the culture we seek to create throughout the school is embodied by our mottolsquoI want to learnrsquo
Overview of key datesFriday Assembly time Heads of Faculty to explain courses on offer each week
Thursday 10th March Information evening for parents and students
Tuesday 22nd March 9 ABCD Consultation Evening
Tuesday 29th March 9 EFGH Consultation Evening
By Thursday 31st March Subject Option forms returned to Form Tutors
May ndash July Options interviews with Mr Iordanou (Assistant Headteacher)
Confirmation of individual student options will be completed by end of the Summer Term
We will always seek to give students the subjects that they wish to study However it may be necessary at times to negotiate and discuss with students which courses it would be appropriate for them to study We will involve parents as fully as possible in these discussions If there are any questions then please do not hesitate to contact Mr Iordanou
04
The C
urric
ulum
for K
ey S
tage
4
05
The Curriculum for Key Stage 4All students should follow courses in English Mathematics Science Technology a Modern Foreign Language Humanities Religious Studies and Physical Education They will also study Citizenship and Personal Social Health and Economics Education (PSHEE) and will have experience of Information Technology which is co-ordinated across a variety of subjects In addition they must choose from a wide range of optional subjects These are explained below
OptionsIf you have chosen Combined Science you can pick any 2 subjects from Group 5
If you have chosen Separate Sciences you pick just 1 subject from Group 5
Group 5ArtMusicDramaPE
Digital ApplicationsComputer Science
GeographyHistory
FrenchGermanSpanish
Business StudiesHealth amp Social CareSociology
EngineeringFood Prep amp NutritionGraphic ProductsProduct DesignTextiles Technology
Compulsory with an Element of ChoiceYou must pick one subject from each Group
Group 1Sciences
Core +Combined Science
ORSeparate Sciences
Group 2Humanities
GeographyOR
History
Group 3Languages
FrenchOR
GermanOR
Spanish
Group 4Technology
EngineeringOR
Food Prep amp NutritionOR
Graphic ProductsOR
Product DesignOR
Textiles Technology
CompulsoryThese are subjects you have to take
MathematicsEnglish amp English Literature
Physical Education (core)
(non GCSE)
ReligiousStudies
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
(non GCSE)
Start Here
Step 1
Step 2
How
to M
ake Y
our C
hoice
s Core SubjectsIt is compulsory for all students to study English Mathematics and Science in Key Stage4 Students in Year 10 and 11 are divided into two half year groups each of which containsthe same spread of ability In each of these subjects there will be several sets composed ofstudents who are expected to achieve the highest grades
Decisions about groups in English Mathematics and Science are made by the respective departments and any questions relating to this can be asked at the forthcoming consultation evening
Optional Subjectsbull When making your choices the subject to start with is Science All students will take either
Core + Combined Science (two GCSE subjects) or Separate Sciences (separate subjects in Physics Chemistry and Biology) Both alternatives have positive advantages
Choosing Separate Sciences will increase the amount of time spent on each Science but limits the number of optional subjects which can be chosen
Before any choice is made it is important to seek advice from the studentrsquos Science Teacher at the forthcoming consultation evening
bull The next step is to choose a subject from the Humanities block (Group 2) a subject from the Modern Foreign Languages block (Group 3) and a subject from the Technology block (Group 4)
The choice of Modern Foreign Language will depend on what the student studies in Year 9 For advice please speak to the appropriate Modern Foreign Languages Teacher
bull The final step is to choose subjects from Group 5 to make up seven options This will depend on the choice of Science subject ie
If Combined Science is chosen two subjects must be chosen from Group 5If Separate Sciences are chosen one subject must be chosen from Group 5
In addition all students follow courses in PE PSHEE and Religious Studies
06
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
The Options Process03 Changes to the Curriculum - 2016 Onwards04 The Options Process Explained05 The Curriculum for Key Stage 406 How to Make Your Choices
Compulsory07 English amp English Literature08 Mathematics09 Physical Education (core)10 Religious Studies11 Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Compulsory with an Element of Choice12 Science14 Humanities16 Modern Foreign Languages17 Technology
Options22 Expressive Arts26 Computing28 Social Sciences
General Information31 lsquoI want to learnrsquo Culture32 Non Examined Assessments amp Homework
Cont
ents
Changes to the Curriculum - 2016 OnwardsAs you may have heard there have been a number of changes in education which will impact on the way our students are to be taught and assessed over the next few years Some of these are being brought in over a period of time but some will impact on our current Year 9 students We will continue to provide the very highest quality teaching so that our students are able to perform to their very best in their GCSEs but a summary of the key changes affecting your child are outlined below
Key changes
1 For the majority of subjects students will now be graded using the new grading scale that uses numbers 1 (lowest) to 9 (highest) which will now replace the old grading system of A to G
2 In English and Maths students will now be assessed only by examination This lsquolinearrsquo assessment started in September 2015 and means that all Year 9 students will sit their GCSE exams at the end of the course For current Year 9 students this will mean sitting exams in May June 2018 Year 9 students will not have coursework in English (currently called lsquoControlled Assessmentsrsquo) but will be assessed at the very end of the course by examinations
There are various other changes which are subject specific and these are outlined on the subject specific page in this booklet If you have any queries do not hesitate to contact the relevant department and they will be happy to help
Chan
ges t
o th
e Cur
ricul
um
03
The O
ptio
ns P
roce
ss E
xpla
ined
The Options Process ExplainedThis booklet is designed to guide and assist both students and parents in the choices that they now face as students come to the end of Key Stage 3 and look ahead to starting their GCSE courses The choices that are made affect the subjects that students will spend their time studying for the next two years The success of students in these courses will have an important effect on the opportunities that will be open to them for the rest of their lives We wish to seeall students succeed and excel in the subjects that they enjoy and are stimulated by with a reminder that the culture we seek to create throughout the school is embodied by our mottolsquoI want to learnrsquo
Overview of key datesFriday Assembly time Heads of Faculty to explain courses on offer each week
Thursday 10th March Information evening for parents and students
Tuesday 22nd March 9 ABCD Consultation Evening
Tuesday 29th March 9 EFGH Consultation Evening
By Thursday 31st March Subject Option forms returned to Form Tutors
May ndash July Options interviews with Mr Iordanou (Assistant Headteacher)
Confirmation of individual student options will be completed by end of the Summer Term
We will always seek to give students the subjects that they wish to study However it may be necessary at times to negotiate and discuss with students which courses it would be appropriate for them to study We will involve parents as fully as possible in these discussions If there are any questions then please do not hesitate to contact Mr Iordanou
04
The C
urric
ulum
for K
ey S
tage
4
05
The Curriculum for Key Stage 4All students should follow courses in English Mathematics Science Technology a Modern Foreign Language Humanities Religious Studies and Physical Education They will also study Citizenship and Personal Social Health and Economics Education (PSHEE) and will have experience of Information Technology which is co-ordinated across a variety of subjects In addition they must choose from a wide range of optional subjects These are explained below
OptionsIf you have chosen Combined Science you can pick any 2 subjects from Group 5
If you have chosen Separate Sciences you pick just 1 subject from Group 5
Group 5ArtMusicDramaPE
Digital ApplicationsComputer Science
GeographyHistory
FrenchGermanSpanish
Business StudiesHealth amp Social CareSociology
EngineeringFood Prep amp NutritionGraphic ProductsProduct DesignTextiles Technology
Compulsory with an Element of ChoiceYou must pick one subject from each Group
Group 1Sciences
Core +Combined Science
ORSeparate Sciences
Group 2Humanities
GeographyOR
History
Group 3Languages
FrenchOR
GermanOR
Spanish
Group 4Technology
EngineeringOR
Food Prep amp NutritionOR
Graphic ProductsOR
Product DesignOR
Textiles Technology
CompulsoryThese are subjects you have to take
MathematicsEnglish amp English Literature
Physical Education (core)
(non GCSE)
ReligiousStudies
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
(non GCSE)
Start Here
Step 1
Step 2
How
to M
ake Y
our C
hoice
s Core SubjectsIt is compulsory for all students to study English Mathematics and Science in Key Stage4 Students in Year 10 and 11 are divided into two half year groups each of which containsthe same spread of ability In each of these subjects there will be several sets composed ofstudents who are expected to achieve the highest grades
Decisions about groups in English Mathematics and Science are made by the respective departments and any questions relating to this can be asked at the forthcoming consultation evening
Optional Subjectsbull When making your choices the subject to start with is Science All students will take either
Core + Combined Science (two GCSE subjects) or Separate Sciences (separate subjects in Physics Chemistry and Biology) Both alternatives have positive advantages
Choosing Separate Sciences will increase the amount of time spent on each Science but limits the number of optional subjects which can be chosen
Before any choice is made it is important to seek advice from the studentrsquos Science Teacher at the forthcoming consultation evening
bull The next step is to choose a subject from the Humanities block (Group 2) a subject from the Modern Foreign Languages block (Group 3) and a subject from the Technology block (Group 4)
The choice of Modern Foreign Language will depend on what the student studies in Year 9 For advice please speak to the appropriate Modern Foreign Languages Teacher
bull The final step is to choose subjects from Group 5 to make up seven options This will depend on the choice of Science subject ie
If Combined Science is chosen two subjects must be chosen from Group 5If Separate Sciences are chosen one subject must be chosen from Group 5
In addition all students follow courses in PE PSHEE and Religious Studies
06
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Changes to the Curriculum - 2016 OnwardsAs you may have heard there have been a number of changes in education which will impact on the way our students are to be taught and assessed over the next few years Some of these are being brought in over a period of time but some will impact on our current Year 9 students We will continue to provide the very highest quality teaching so that our students are able to perform to their very best in their GCSEs but a summary of the key changes affecting your child are outlined below
Key changes
1 For the majority of subjects students will now be graded using the new grading scale that uses numbers 1 (lowest) to 9 (highest) which will now replace the old grading system of A to G
2 In English and Maths students will now be assessed only by examination This lsquolinearrsquo assessment started in September 2015 and means that all Year 9 students will sit their GCSE exams at the end of the course For current Year 9 students this will mean sitting exams in May June 2018 Year 9 students will not have coursework in English (currently called lsquoControlled Assessmentsrsquo) but will be assessed at the very end of the course by examinations
There are various other changes which are subject specific and these are outlined on the subject specific page in this booklet If you have any queries do not hesitate to contact the relevant department and they will be happy to help
Chan
ges t
o th
e Cur
ricul
um
03
The O
ptio
ns P
roce
ss E
xpla
ined
The Options Process ExplainedThis booklet is designed to guide and assist both students and parents in the choices that they now face as students come to the end of Key Stage 3 and look ahead to starting their GCSE courses The choices that are made affect the subjects that students will spend their time studying for the next two years The success of students in these courses will have an important effect on the opportunities that will be open to them for the rest of their lives We wish to seeall students succeed and excel in the subjects that they enjoy and are stimulated by with a reminder that the culture we seek to create throughout the school is embodied by our mottolsquoI want to learnrsquo
Overview of key datesFriday Assembly time Heads of Faculty to explain courses on offer each week
Thursday 10th March Information evening for parents and students
Tuesday 22nd March 9 ABCD Consultation Evening
Tuesday 29th March 9 EFGH Consultation Evening
By Thursday 31st March Subject Option forms returned to Form Tutors
May ndash July Options interviews with Mr Iordanou (Assistant Headteacher)
Confirmation of individual student options will be completed by end of the Summer Term
We will always seek to give students the subjects that they wish to study However it may be necessary at times to negotiate and discuss with students which courses it would be appropriate for them to study We will involve parents as fully as possible in these discussions If there are any questions then please do not hesitate to contact Mr Iordanou
04
The C
urric
ulum
for K
ey S
tage
4
05
The Curriculum for Key Stage 4All students should follow courses in English Mathematics Science Technology a Modern Foreign Language Humanities Religious Studies and Physical Education They will also study Citizenship and Personal Social Health and Economics Education (PSHEE) and will have experience of Information Technology which is co-ordinated across a variety of subjects In addition they must choose from a wide range of optional subjects These are explained below
OptionsIf you have chosen Combined Science you can pick any 2 subjects from Group 5
If you have chosen Separate Sciences you pick just 1 subject from Group 5
Group 5ArtMusicDramaPE
Digital ApplicationsComputer Science
GeographyHistory
FrenchGermanSpanish
Business StudiesHealth amp Social CareSociology
EngineeringFood Prep amp NutritionGraphic ProductsProduct DesignTextiles Technology
Compulsory with an Element of ChoiceYou must pick one subject from each Group
Group 1Sciences
Core +Combined Science
ORSeparate Sciences
Group 2Humanities
GeographyOR
History
Group 3Languages
FrenchOR
GermanOR
Spanish
Group 4Technology
EngineeringOR
Food Prep amp NutritionOR
Graphic ProductsOR
Product DesignOR
Textiles Technology
CompulsoryThese are subjects you have to take
MathematicsEnglish amp English Literature
Physical Education (core)
(non GCSE)
ReligiousStudies
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
(non GCSE)
Start Here
Step 1
Step 2
How
to M
ake Y
our C
hoice
s Core SubjectsIt is compulsory for all students to study English Mathematics and Science in Key Stage4 Students in Year 10 and 11 are divided into two half year groups each of which containsthe same spread of ability In each of these subjects there will be several sets composed ofstudents who are expected to achieve the highest grades
Decisions about groups in English Mathematics and Science are made by the respective departments and any questions relating to this can be asked at the forthcoming consultation evening
Optional Subjectsbull When making your choices the subject to start with is Science All students will take either
Core + Combined Science (two GCSE subjects) or Separate Sciences (separate subjects in Physics Chemistry and Biology) Both alternatives have positive advantages
Choosing Separate Sciences will increase the amount of time spent on each Science but limits the number of optional subjects which can be chosen
Before any choice is made it is important to seek advice from the studentrsquos Science Teacher at the forthcoming consultation evening
bull The next step is to choose a subject from the Humanities block (Group 2) a subject from the Modern Foreign Languages block (Group 3) and a subject from the Technology block (Group 4)
The choice of Modern Foreign Language will depend on what the student studies in Year 9 For advice please speak to the appropriate Modern Foreign Languages Teacher
bull The final step is to choose subjects from Group 5 to make up seven options This will depend on the choice of Science subject ie
If Combined Science is chosen two subjects must be chosen from Group 5If Separate Sciences are chosen one subject must be chosen from Group 5
In addition all students follow courses in PE PSHEE and Religious Studies
06
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
The O
ptio
ns P
roce
ss E
xpla
ined
The Options Process ExplainedThis booklet is designed to guide and assist both students and parents in the choices that they now face as students come to the end of Key Stage 3 and look ahead to starting their GCSE courses The choices that are made affect the subjects that students will spend their time studying for the next two years The success of students in these courses will have an important effect on the opportunities that will be open to them for the rest of their lives We wish to seeall students succeed and excel in the subjects that they enjoy and are stimulated by with a reminder that the culture we seek to create throughout the school is embodied by our mottolsquoI want to learnrsquo
Overview of key datesFriday Assembly time Heads of Faculty to explain courses on offer each week
Thursday 10th March Information evening for parents and students
Tuesday 22nd March 9 ABCD Consultation Evening
Tuesday 29th March 9 EFGH Consultation Evening
By Thursday 31st March Subject Option forms returned to Form Tutors
May ndash July Options interviews with Mr Iordanou (Assistant Headteacher)
Confirmation of individual student options will be completed by end of the Summer Term
We will always seek to give students the subjects that they wish to study However it may be necessary at times to negotiate and discuss with students which courses it would be appropriate for them to study We will involve parents as fully as possible in these discussions If there are any questions then please do not hesitate to contact Mr Iordanou
04
The C
urric
ulum
for K
ey S
tage
4
05
The Curriculum for Key Stage 4All students should follow courses in English Mathematics Science Technology a Modern Foreign Language Humanities Religious Studies and Physical Education They will also study Citizenship and Personal Social Health and Economics Education (PSHEE) and will have experience of Information Technology which is co-ordinated across a variety of subjects In addition they must choose from a wide range of optional subjects These are explained below
OptionsIf you have chosen Combined Science you can pick any 2 subjects from Group 5
If you have chosen Separate Sciences you pick just 1 subject from Group 5
Group 5ArtMusicDramaPE
Digital ApplicationsComputer Science
GeographyHistory
FrenchGermanSpanish
Business StudiesHealth amp Social CareSociology
EngineeringFood Prep amp NutritionGraphic ProductsProduct DesignTextiles Technology
Compulsory with an Element of ChoiceYou must pick one subject from each Group
Group 1Sciences
Core +Combined Science
ORSeparate Sciences
Group 2Humanities
GeographyOR
History
Group 3Languages
FrenchOR
GermanOR
Spanish
Group 4Technology
EngineeringOR
Food Prep amp NutritionOR
Graphic ProductsOR
Product DesignOR
Textiles Technology
CompulsoryThese are subjects you have to take
MathematicsEnglish amp English Literature
Physical Education (core)
(non GCSE)
ReligiousStudies
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
(non GCSE)
Start Here
Step 1
Step 2
How
to M
ake Y
our C
hoice
s Core SubjectsIt is compulsory for all students to study English Mathematics and Science in Key Stage4 Students in Year 10 and 11 are divided into two half year groups each of which containsthe same spread of ability In each of these subjects there will be several sets composed ofstudents who are expected to achieve the highest grades
Decisions about groups in English Mathematics and Science are made by the respective departments and any questions relating to this can be asked at the forthcoming consultation evening
Optional Subjectsbull When making your choices the subject to start with is Science All students will take either
Core + Combined Science (two GCSE subjects) or Separate Sciences (separate subjects in Physics Chemistry and Biology) Both alternatives have positive advantages
Choosing Separate Sciences will increase the amount of time spent on each Science but limits the number of optional subjects which can be chosen
Before any choice is made it is important to seek advice from the studentrsquos Science Teacher at the forthcoming consultation evening
bull The next step is to choose a subject from the Humanities block (Group 2) a subject from the Modern Foreign Languages block (Group 3) and a subject from the Technology block (Group 4)
The choice of Modern Foreign Language will depend on what the student studies in Year 9 For advice please speak to the appropriate Modern Foreign Languages Teacher
bull The final step is to choose subjects from Group 5 to make up seven options This will depend on the choice of Science subject ie
If Combined Science is chosen two subjects must be chosen from Group 5If Separate Sciences are chosen one subject must be chosen from Group 5
In addition all students follow courses in PE PSHEE and Religious Studies
06
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
The C
urric
ulum
for K
ey S
tage
4
05
The Curriculum for Key Stage 4All students should follow courses in English Mathematics Science Technology a Modern Foreign Language Humanities Religious Studies and Physical Education They will also study Citizenship and Personal Social Health and Economics Education (PSHEE) and will have experience of Information Technology which is co-ordinated across a variety of subjects In addition they must choose from a wide range of optional subjects These are explained below
OptionsIf you have chosen Combined Science you can pick any 2 subjects from Group 5
If you have chosen Separate Sciences you pick just 1 subject from Group 5
Group 5ArtMusicDramaPE
Digital ApplicationsComputer Science
GeographyHistory
FrenchGermanSpanish
Business StudiesHealth amp Social CareSociology
EngineeringFood Prep amp NutritionGraphic ProductsProduct DesignTextiles Technology
Compulsory with an Element of ChoiceYou must pick one subject from each Group
Group 1Sciences
Core +Combined Science
ORSeparate Sciences
Group 2Humanities
GeographyOR
History
Group 3Languages
FrenchOR
GermanOR
Spanish
Group 4Technology
EngineeringOR
Food Prep amp NutritionOR
Graphic ProductsOR
Product DesignOR
Textiles Technology
CompulsoryThese are subjects you have to take
MathematicsEnglish amp English Literature
Physical Education (core)
(non GCSE)
ReligiousStudies
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
(non GCSE)
Start Here
Step 1
Step 2
How
to M
ake Y
our C
hoice
s Core SubjectsIt is compulsory for all students to study English Mathematics and Science in Key Stage4 Students in Year 10 and 11 are divided into two half year groups each of which containsthe same spread of ability In each of these subjects there will be several sets composed ofstudents who are expected to achieve the highest grades
Decisions about groups in English Mathematics and Science are made by the respective departments and any questions relating to this can be asked at the forthcoming consultation evening
Optional Subjectsbull When making your choices the subject to start with is Science All students will take either
Core + Combined Science (two GCSE subjects) or Separate Sciences (separate subjects in Physics Chemistry and Biology) Both alternatives have positive advantages
Choosing Separate Sciences will increase the amount of time spent on each Science but limits the number of optional subjects which can be chosen
Before any choice is made it is important to seek advice from the studentrsquos Science Teacher at the forthcoming consultation evening
bull The next step is to choose a subject from the Humanities block (Group 2) a subject from the Modern Foreign Languages block (Group 3) and a subject from the Technology block (Group 4)
The choice of Modern Foreign Language will depend on what the student studies in Year 9 For advice please speak to the appropriate Modern Foreign Languages Teacher
bull The final step is to choose subjects from Group 5 to make up seven options This will depend on the choice of Science subject ie
If Combined Science is chosen two subjects must be chosen from Group 5If Separate Sciences are chosen one subject must be chosen from Group 5
In addition all students follow courses in PE PSHEE and Religious Studies
06
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
How
to M
ake Y
our C
hoice
s Core SubjectsIt is compulsory for all students to study English Mathematics and Science in Key Stage4 Students in Year 10 and 11 are divided into two half year groups each of which containsthe same spread of ability In each of these subjects there will be several sets composed ofstudents who are expected to achieve the highest grades
Decisions about groups in English Mathematics and Science are made by the respective departments and any questions relating to this can be asked at the forthcoming consultation evening
Optional Subjectsbull When making your choices the subject to start with is Science All students will take either
Core + Combined Science (two GCSE subjects) or Separate Sciences (separate subjects in Physics Chemistry and Biology) Both alternatives have positive advantages
Choosing Separate Sciences will increase the amount of time spent on each Science but limits the number of optional subjects which can be chosen
Before any choice is made it is important to seek advice from the studentrsquos Science Teacher at the forthcoming consultation evening
bull The next step is to choose a subject from the Humanities block (Group 2) a subject from the Modern Foreign Languages block (Group 3) and a subject from the Technology block (Group 4)
The choice of Modern Foreign Language will depend on what the student studies in Year 9 For advice please speak to the appropriate Modern Foreign Languages Teacher
bull The final step is to choose subjects from Group 5 to make up seven options This will depend on the choice of Science subject ie
If Combined Science is chosen two subjects must be chosen from Group 5If Separate Sciences are chosen one subject must be chosen from Group 5
In addition all students follow courses in PE PSHEE and Religious Studies
06
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr H Seckleman
Content of CourseOur general aims are to ensure that students develop language skills for life and that they learn to read write and talk fluently accurately intelligently and in a variety of styles so that they can deal with the demands of an increasingly complex world
English Language revolves around students developing these language skills through written work speaking and listening drama and non-fiction Students are expected to produce substantial pieces of written work Homework set will include background reading research revision and extended pieces of writing
The two English Language examinations involve students responding to unseen texts from the 19th 20th and 21st centuries Students are also required to write fiction and non-fiction texts eg a short story a letter or a diary entry
The assessment pattern for GCSE has undergone significant changes In English Language three areas are assessed speaking and listening reading and writing The assessment is now made up of 100 terminal examinations
English Literature is also now assessed completely by terminal examinations The two English Literature examinations require students to respond to the following texts studied in class
A Christmas Carol ndash Charles DickensAn Inspector Calls ndash JB PriestleyMacbeth ndash William ShakespeareA collection of 15 poems from The Edexcel Conflict Poetry Anthology
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE English Language Edexcel GCSE English Literature
Useful Websites Edexcelrsquos English Language and Literature Webpage for edexcelcomqualsgcsegcse10englishPagesdefaultaspxthe specifications
Bitesize GCSE English Language bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish
Bitesize GCSE Literature bbccoukschoolsgcsebitesizeenglish_literature
Sparknotes Literature Page sparknotescomlit
Andrew Moorersquos study notes - universalteacherorgukEnglish Language amp Literature
English amp English Literature
07
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr M Gomez
Content of CourseAll students in Years 10 and 11 study Mathematics and continue to develop their understanding in Number Algebra Shape and Space Handling Data and in using and applying Mathematics Class lessons include discussion of topics but students also work individually completing questions Students work is continually assessed and module tests are given frequently
Homework plays a very important part in the learning process This often takes the form of review exercises which enable students to reflect on the ideas they have studied in class and to apply their understanding to a variety of problems
Students are set according to the level of understanding which they have demonstrated during Year 9 and work towards the appropriate tier of GCSE The system however is flexible and there is movement between the sets if it proves advisable There are two tiers of entry for GCSE Higher or Foundation There is no coursework component in this qualification
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel ndash HigherFoundation
Three examination papers ndash two calculator one non-calculator - to be taken at the end of Year 11
Calculators are used in most lessons as a tool in problem solving They are essential in examinations and students are expected to bring their own to all lessons Similarly other basic equipment pen pencil ruler eraser angle measurer compasses are the students responsibility and should be brought to all lessons
Recommended CalculatorA calculator recommended for GCSE by the EBS Mathematics Department is available to buy directly from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcoukcollectionsebs-goodies
Mathematics
08
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr D Smith
Content of CoursePE in Years 10 and 11 will provide students with the opportunity to take some of the activities covered inKey Stage 3 further For one period of the week pupils will have the opportunity to choose the activities they study as opposed to the previously prescribed curriculum Pupils will be taught according to GCSE PE criteria and be challenged to achieve the very best they can
AssessmentThere are no assessment requirements for pupils at Key Stage 4
PE Kit
As in previous years All PE Kit can be purchased from the EBS Shop httpeastbarnetshopcouk
General PE Rules ndash Boys and Girlsbull A note from your parent or guardian is essential if you need to be excused from PEbull Full PE kit is essential If there is a problem with kit you must bring a note from your parent or guardian
explaining the problem
Extra Curricular SportWe endeavour to put on a vast range of extra-curricular sport as well as the traditional sports we are now also offering Golf and Cycling as more alternative activities
A full list of clubs is available on the school website
httpwwweastbarnetschoolcomstudentsclubs
Alternatively scan the following code using your smart phone
Physical Education (core)
09
EAST BARNET SCHOOLPHYSICA L EDUCATION
BoysRugby Shirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
GirlsSweatshirt
Polo Shirt
Chama
Keller
Murray
Tutu
Shorts
Bottoms
Socks
Training Shoes
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs J Idrees
Content of CourseReligious Studies in Years 10 and 11 represents the logical development and extension of the foundation course undertaken by all students in Years 7 to 9 GCSE Religious Studies is based on the fact that religion is a vital aspect of the modern world and that we all meet religion in some form in our daily lives Therefore we all need to know about and understand religion You will be studying Religion and Life (3 of these modules have been covered in RE in Year 9) and Religion and Society We will study Christianity and Islam within the modules
GCSE Religious Studies at East Barnet aims
bull To help students adopt an enquiring critical and reflective approach to the study of religionbull To explore all aspects of religious belief and practice in Christianity and Islam (For example hopefully visits
to a local church and a mosque should be arranged to gain invaluable first hand experience of religious expression)
bull To help students explore questions about the meaning of life eg Why am I here What is really importantbull To encourage students to reflect on the religious responses to vital moral questions like marriage women in
religion prejudice and discriminationbull To help students appreciate the contribution religion makes to modern life in a variety of ways eg through
films books the law and so on
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE 2RS01 Religion amp Life Religion amp SocietyAssessment for this course is 100 examination which consists of two written papers based on religion and life and religion and society
Progression routesEmployers today consider Religious Studies an important and valuable qualification as it provides students with vital life-skills Religious Studies is a great qualification for any job that involves working with people as it helps you to understand people and why they act in the way they do
If you get a job in a city where there will be people from different faiths and backgrounds Religious Studies will help you understand the people you meet so you can get on in life
Religious Studies
10
This is the course that has been running up until now Due to new government proposals for Religious Studies next academic year the course is subject to change Unfortunately the changes have not yet been finalised by the government and the department will be able to provide more information later
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr C Drugan
Content of Course1 The PSHEE programme aims to help students to continue to develop their personal and interpersonal
skills Through a series of modules students are encouraged to develop an understanding of themselves their reactions and their strengths and weaknesses The programme also aims to develop a sense of responsibility in students and encourage them to make healthy and informed choices Listening and responding appropriately negotiation and compromise understanding someone elsersquos viewpoint are all important skills in developing a better understanding of oneself and onersquos role in the wider community
2 The Citizenship programme will help students improve their knowledge and understanding of the different Citizenship themes Global Citizenship The Environment Human Rights The Criminal Justice System Government and Democracy The Law Economic Awareness The Media Rights and Responsibilities in the world of work and Challenging Racism and Discrimination
Contact Mrs E Betts
Content of CourseIt is expected that Year 10 students will take part in a two week period of work experience during the Summer Term Preparatory work takes place in PSHEE Students are fully prepared for Work Experience in their PSHEE lessons and evaluate their experience afterwards
They also have access to a module that enables them to consider their career choices at post 16 level and set themselves a challenge to locate information about an educational course apprenticeship or job that interests them
Students gain from their work experience enormously they increase their self-confidence they are able to relate some of what they have learned in school to the world of work they gain an insight into the world of business and they obtain a realistic idea of what a working day involves
Citizenship amp PSHEE Studies
Year 10 Work Experience
11
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr S OwenA majority of students will follow the AQA Core Science (A - 4405) and the Additional Science (4408) specifications Some students will be encouraged to opt for the AQA Triple Science option (AQA specification reference 4401 Biology 4402 Chemistry 4403 Physics)
1 AQA Combined Science (Trilogy 8464)The course is suitable for students of all abilities It can form the Science component of the English Baccalaureate and does allow progression to studying Biology Chemistry and Physics at lsquoArsquo Level (minimum expected grades to allow for this progression at East Barnet School is a lsquoBrsquo grade equivalent in both Combined Science (Trilogy) English and Mathematics)
The Combined Science (Trilogy) option will run as a four period per week two year course
Content of Course
Biology Chemistry PhysicsCell Biology Atomic Structure amp the Periodic Table Forces
Organisation Bonding Structure amp the Properties of Matter
Energy
Infection amp Response Quantitative Chemistry Waves
Bioenergetics Chemical Changes Electricity
Homeostasis amp Response Energy Changes Magnetism amp Electromagnetism
Inheritance Variation amp Evolution The Rate amp Extent of Chemical Change Particle Model of Matter
Ecology Organic Chemistry Atomic Structure
Chemical Analysis
Chemistry of the Atmosphere
Using Resources
Pupils who have successfully followed this course will be able tobull Develop scientific knowledge and conceptual understanding of Sciencebull Develop and learn to apply observational practical modelling enquiry and problem solving skillsbull Develop the ability to evaluate claims based on science through critical analysis of the methodology
evidence and conclusions both qualitatively and quantitatively
AssessmentThis specification is designed to be taken over two years It is a linear qualification In order to achieve the award students must complete all assessments at the end of the course and in the same series The six papers at the top of the following page will need to be sat either at higher or foundation level to achieve the award
Note Although practical work will be at the heart of this specification there is no lsquopractical examrsquo There will be questions in the written exams that will draw on the knowledge and understanding students have gained by carrying out a specific set of 16 practicals (provided by AQA) These questions will count for at least 15 of the overall marks for the qualification
Sciences
12
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Paper Duration mins Raw Mark of GCSEBiology Paper 1 75 70 167
Biology Paper 2 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 1 75 70 167
Chemistry Paper 2 75 70 167
Physics Paper 1 75 70 167
Physics Paper 2 75 70 167
2 AQA Separate Sciences (8461 Biology 8462 Chemistry amp 8463 Physics)AQA GCSE Biology Chemistry and Physics will also be offered in a lsquoSeparate Sciencesrsquo format
Each subject can contribute towards the Science component of the English Baccalaureate if students enter any three of the four separate sciences ndash Biology Chemistry Physics and Computer Science ndash and achieve grades A to C in at least two of them
The Separate Science option will offer AQA Sciences as a six period two year course Students will be taught by a subject specialist teacher for each of the three sciences Each science is assessed using two exams at the end of Year 11 Each paper is 1hr 45minutes long and comprises of a mixture of multiple choice closed short answer and open response questions
This course is intended for students who are very interested in Science and are very keen to progress to lsquoArsquo Level qualifications in Science This course is more challenging than the Combined Science (Trilogy) course and as such it is more appropriate for students who are demonstrating Extending level knowledge at Key Stage 3
Separate Sciences (Biology Chemistry Physics) ContentStudents are taught the same basic content as Combined Science students this is then built on and extended in the subject specific units which are only taught to pupils taking Separate Sciences These units are taught throughout the two year course allowing students to be challenged and demonstrate deeper understanding throughout
Biology Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Cell biology Organisation Infection and response and Bioenergetics
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Biology GCSE
Homeostasis and response Inheritance variation and evolution and Ecology
Chemistry Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
Atomic structure and the periodic table Bonding structure and the properties of matter Quantitative chemistry Chemical changes and Energy changes
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Chemistry GCSE
The rate and extent of chemical change Organic chemistry Chemical analysis Chemistry of the atmosphere and Using resources
Physics Paper 1
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Energy Electricity Particle model of matter Atomic structure
Paper 2
100 marks 50 of Physics GCSE
Forces Waves Magnetism and electromagnetism Space physics
Sciences continued
13
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr A J Macdonald
Content of CourseThe New AQA Geography GCSE specification outline is below This is subject to changes (usually minor) prior to accreditation
Paper 1 Living with Physical Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A the challenge of natural hazards (30 marks)Section B Physical landscapes of the UK (30 marks)Section C The living world (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88 marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 2 Challenges in the Human Environment
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Urban challenges (30 marks)Section B The changing economic world (30 marks)Section C The challenge of resource management (25 marks)
Written exam ndash 1 hours 30 minsTotal 88marks (including 3 SPaG)35 of GCSE
Paper 3 Geographical Applications
Whatrsquos Assessed How itrsquos Assessed
Section A Issue evaluation (34 marks)Section B Fieldwork (36 marks) 1 Questions based on unfamiliar resources 2 Questions based on students fieldwork
Written exam ndash 1 hours Total 76 marks (including 3 SPaG)30 of GCSE
Who should study this courseGeography GCSE is a valuable subject in its own right It is also a subject that links well with other school subjects and contributes to their understanding
You can travel the seas poles and deserts and see nothing To really understand the world you need to get under the skin of the people and places In other words learn Geography I canrsquot imagine a subject more relevant in schools Wersquod all be lost without it
- Michael Palin actor writer traveller
Fieldwork We are currently planning two days of fieldwork that would run as day trips Over the two days we will study aspects of both human and physical Geography For example rivers and urban areas
Progression routesGeography AS and lsquoArsquo Level students are expected to achieve a good grade in GCSE Geography Our lsquoArsquo Level students have gone on to study Environmental Science Cartography and Geography at university
Due to the broad range of skills Geography develops it is a highly suitable subject for students seeking work in commercial professions such as accountancy insurance banking retailing as well as the armed services and public services It can also lead to specific careers in weather forecasting and climatology town and country planning environmental planning surveying oceanography geology cartography tourism transport and more
Humanities Geography
ldquo rdquo
14
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Ms E Christie
Content of CoursePaper 1 Thematic Study and Historic EnvironmentCrime and punishment in Britain c1000-present and Whitechapel c1870-c1900 crime policing and the inner citySection A Historic environment ndash Students answer a question that assesses knowledge plus a two-part question based on two provided sourcesSection B Thematic study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding
Written exam1 hour 15 mins30 of GCSE
Paper 2 Period Study and British Depth StudyBritish Depth Study Anglo-Saxon and Norman England c1060ndash88Period Study Superpower relations and the Cold War 1941ndash91Section A Period study ndash Students answer three questions that assess their knowledge and understanding The first two questions are compulsory For the third question students select two out of three partsSection B British depth study ndash Students answer a single three-part question that assesses their knowledge and understanding
Written exam 1 hour 45 mins40 of GCSE
Paper 3 Modern Depth StudyWeimar and Nazi Germany 1918ndash39Section A Students answer a question based on a provided source and a question that assesses their knowledge and understandingSection B Students answer a single four-part question based on two provided sources and two provided interpretations
Written exam1 hour 20 mins 30 of GCSE
Examination Board Edexcel GCSE History
GCSE History is an interesting and challenging course that builds on the topic areas that students have studied in Year 9 and the historical skills that have been developed at Key Stage 3
GCSE History students should expect to develop the following skills the ability to consider different sides of an argument to form an opinion to comprehend evaluate and interpret a wide range of historical sources to work independently and as part of a group and the ability to communicate ideas and understanding through class discussion and in written work
Who should study this courseYou should take GCSE History if you enjoy the subject find History interesting and want to know more about the world you live in and the events and personalities that have shaped it
Progression routesUniversities colleges and employers know that anyone with a GCSE in History has demonstrated that they are an independent thinker who can critically evaluate information listen objectively and communicate effectively History graduates provide more directors of Britainrsquos leading companies than any other subject outperforming law science and engineering Studying GCSE provides you with transferable skills that can be used in any field and can lead towards a career in Law Politics Media Journalism Accountancy Marketing the Civil Service Human Resources business and many more
Humanities History
15
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
French | German | SpanishAll students are expected to study a Modern Foreign Language and they need to choose a language which they have already been taught If a student has learnt two languages in Key Stage 3 heshe can choose either to do one language or both However if a student chooses hisher second language heshe will need the approval of the relevant Head of Department
Contact Mr J Giffen (Head of French V Guenole | Head of German J Wolf | Head of Spanish E Page)
Content of CourseThis will be a new GCSE course and at the time of writing only one of the four examination boards has had its specification approved Therefore we have not yet decided which board we will be using However all of the courses will build on and expand material taught at Key Stage 3 and will continue to develop the four skills of listening speaking reading and writing Grammar will also be taught in the context of the topic areas which will be similar for all the exam boards Topics Identity amp Culture (me family amp friends technology in everyday life free-time activities) local national international amp global areas of interest (home town neighbourhood amp region social issues global issues travel amp tourism) current amp future study amp employment (my studies life at school education post-16 jobs career choices amp ambitions)
AssessmentExamination Board TBC (see above)
Each of the four skills (Listening Speaking Reading and Writing) will be assessed through exams at the end of the 2 year course and will be worth 25 of the overall mark These exams will include short translations into and from the foreign language Two tiers of examination (Foundation and Higher) are offered in all of the four skills but students must take the same tier for each exam
Why is studying a language usefulEmployees with good language skills generally receive better pay and exporters record substantially more sales if they are able to speak the relevant foreign language Learning how to communicate in another language improves your communication skills and helps your own understanding of your own language In addition studies have shown that students who study a language get better exam results in all subjects than those who give languages up even in Science and Mathematics
Progression routesAs part of the English Baccalaureate a GCSE in a Modern Foreign Language is an important qualification A GCSE in Languages is a good starting point for anyone interested in careers in the following areas Business Law Performing Arts Tourism Journalism Catering Science and Education (primary and secondary) Having a GCSE in a language is now an entry requirement for all courses at several good universities At East Barnet School all three languages are offered at AS and A2 Level
Community LanguagesSpeakers of other languages (eg Turkish Greek etc) can arrange to do a GCSE in this language at school but will not receive any tuition in the language These students will still be expected to study French German or Spanish for GCSE
Modern Foreign Languages
16
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr C Zane
Content of CourseThis course will focus on designing and making products with an emphasis on providing students with the technical knowledge skills and understanding associated with engineering The course also focuses on how products are made in the real world leading to two major coursework projects
Students willbull understand the contribution that engineering makes to society and the economybull develop an awareness and appreciation of commercial and industry issues and emerging technologies in the
context of engineeringbull develop and use a range of transferable skills when designing and making engineered products to enable
them to become effective and independent individualsbull develop applied engineering skills as a foundation for future learning and progressionbull apply their knowledge and understanding of engineering by using skills of evaluation and problem solving
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J322
Unit 1 A621 Study of an Engineered Product (coursework - Controlled Assessment)In this unit candidates will consider bull the impact of modern technologies bull production details (materials and components available technology) bull engineering processes bull design solutions
Unit 1 A621 Engineering a Product (coursework ndash Controlled Assessment) In this unit candidates will considerbull analysing client design briefs for engineered products bull developing design solutions for engineered products bull engineering a productbull analysing and revising the completed product taking into account how it could be improved
Unit 2 A622 (Examined Unit)
Who should study this courseThis course will be particularly suitable for students who enjoy learning and understanding about how engineered products are designed and manufactured There is a large element of coursework involving product analysis along with design and practical work
A very detailed coursework portfolio will have to be submitted forming 60 of the students overall mark Homework forms an essential part of completing the course successfully
Progression routesIt is very useful to those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE such as Product Design Physics and Mathematics Students who wish to study Mechanical Engineering Civil Engineering or Engineering Designat College or University would also find this course extremely suitable
D+T Engineering
17
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis is an exciting and creative course which focuses on practical cooking skills and will ensure students develop a greater understanding of nutrition and food provenance enabling them to cook and apply the principles of food science nutrition and healthy eating
Written work is also required to interpret and record data
The course also offers the opportunity to take the Foundation Certificate in Basic Food Hygiene which is a legal requirement within the food industry and enables students to develop skills in time management and the use of various tools and equipment
Ingredients will need to be supplied by students for the course If there is a problem with this then the school fund policy will come into action on discussion with parentcarer
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 8585
The qualification is linear Linear means that students will sit all their exams and submit all their non-exam assessment work at the end of the course
There are two Non-Exam Assessments (a Food investigation report and a Food preparation assessmentportfolio which includes a 3-hour practical cooking exam) due to take place in the second year (Year 11) of the course These two non-exam assessments contribute to 50 of the final mark and represents approximately 30 hours of work
The final exam (in the 2nd year of the course) is 1frac12 hours in length and will be 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed food technology both the written and practical elements of the subject in Years 7 8 and 9 It is most suited for students who would like to further develop their cooking skills and at the same time enhance their ICT skills within the context of Food
Progression routesBeyond GCSE and upon completion of this course students will be qualified to go on to further study at AndashLevel in Food Technology or Food Nutrition amp Health Technical Award qualifications related to food Modern apprenticeships in Hotels and Catering in the food industry and Food related degrees at universities such as Reading or even the Nestle Academy
D+T Food Prep amp Nutrition
18
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs C Chandler
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to design and make products with creativity and originality in a variety of practical activities using a range of graphic and modelling materials and new technologies
They will continue to become independent learners whilst furthering their experience of analysing decision making designing and making
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4552There is one tier of assessment covering A to G
This consists of
Unit 1 Written Paper (45501) ndash 2 hours ndash 120 marks ndash 40Candidates answer all question in two sections pre release material is issued
Unit 2 Design and Making Practice (45502) ndash Approx 45 hours ndash 90 marks ndash 60Consists of a single lsquodesign and makersquo activity selected from a range of exam board set tasks
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to students who like to design and model in paper card and some plastics and wish to have a wider knowledge of related manufacturing processes They will learn about a range of Designers Smart Materials and CADCAM
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design and related Diplomas and BTECs
D+T Graphic Products
19
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs C Roncarati
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to continue developing their designing and making skills using wood metal and plastic but greater emphasis will be put into innovation and creativity when designing They will gain a greater understanding of the various factors which influence a designer as well as carrying out more research designing developing modelling and making Students will also be expected to learn to use CAD packages such as Google Sketchup andor AutoDesk Inventor and 3D modelling skills as part of their design work All of this will be spread over the 2 year course
AssessmentExamination Board OCR J305
There are 4 units of work ndash 2 of which are coursework (Controlled Assessment) and the other 2 are exams
The Controlled Assessment consists of
1 a unit which requires students to identify a problem research it produce creative imaginative designs which they will develop through sketching and modelling until a final design is reached This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term
2 a unit in which students make a practical piece to demonstrate their skills They will then need to test the product they have made and finally produce a marketing presentation for it This will be taught and carried out over the space of a term during Year 11
The exams are as follows
1 a 1frac12 hour written and designing paper which tests them on their understanding of the factors which designers need to consider They will also need to produce design ideas a development and final design for a given problem
2 a 6frac12 hour Innovation Challenge exam which tests students on how creative they can be when designing and modelling to solve a given problem
The Controlled Assessments add up to 60 of their total GCSE mark and the exam is 40
Who should study this courseThis course will be well suited to students who enjoyed investigating designing modelling and making products from wood metal and plastics during Year 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop all of these and be awarded for their creative thinking
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design
D+T Product Design
20
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Ms E Connor
Content of CourseThis course will enable students to develop their knowledge skills and understanding of Textiles Technology within an overall design and make approach It will include work such as textile product planning and development industrial processes and the use of IT applications (CADCAM) through both practical and written work
AssessmentExamination Board AQA 4570
Unit 1 Untiered written paper ndash this is a 2 hour exam paper which contributes to 40 of the final mark
Unit 2 Controlled Design amp Make assessment ndash this will contribute to 60 of the final mark and represents 45 hours of work
Who should study this courseThis course is well suited to those who have enjoyed Textiles work both written design and practical sessions in Years 7 8 and 9 and who wish to develop specialised computing skills to support designing and making
Progression routesIt is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS and A2 Product Design BTEC Level 3 Extended Diploma in Textiles BTEC Extended Diploma in Fashion amp Clothing BA(Hons) Fashion amp Textiles and ArtPhotography with Textiles
D+T Textiles Technology
21
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr P Chatterton
Content of CourseThe GCSE Fine Art course aims to enable all Year 10 and Year 11 students to demonstrate growth and development of their creative powers and visual understanding Art Classes are organised as mixed ability groups following a syllabus leading to a common examination at the end of two years
The Year 10 course seeks to develop and improve studentsrsquo skills and understanding of various art disciplines Drawing is an important part of the course alongside painting design work mixed media three dimensional work and a study of artists and their work Several pieces of work are undertaken in Year 10 and students are expected to prepare for these using sketchbooks Homework is set once a week and is an integral part of the course
In Year 11 students will use all the skills and knowledge developed in Year 10 to produce more individual based pieces of work and they are able to select the media and methods with which they wish to work
The best work from Year 10 and Year 11 will be selected as the work to be assessed for the Controlled Assessment unit It is important that students work hard at all times as potentially any of the work produced over the two years could be selected
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel GCSE in Fine Art (2FA01)
Summary of scheme of assessment Unit 1 Controlled Assessment Unit 1 = 60 of total markUnit 2 Externally set timed test Unit 2 taken at the end of course = 40 of total mark
Who should study this courseStudents who wish to develop their creative and technical art skills to a high standard You should enjoy drawing using paint experimenting with a variety of media and studying artists methods and ideas You will need art if you wish to follow a career in design fashion photography and other related design careers
Progression routesAS and lsquoArsquo Level Art courses BTEC at colleges of further education Art foundation courses BA (Hons) Degree course in Art and Design areas
Examples of Careers in Art amp Design Graphic Design Illustration Computer Aided Design Fashion amp Textiles Product Design Photography Ceramics Painter Sculptor Architect
Useful websitesTate Galleries tateorguk Saatchi Gallery saatchigallerycom National Gallery nationalgallerycouk National Portrait Gallery npgorguk Art Encyclopaedia britannicacom
Expressive Arts Art
22
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs K Eustace
Content of CourseThe GCSE Music course is divided into three areas for assessment and allows for a varied course including practical and listening work
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Paper 1 PerformingAll students perform regularly on an instrument of their choice or sing throughout the course One piece is examined at the end of Year 11 (15) one ensemble performance is assessed during the course (15)
Paper 2 ComposingAll students compose regularly and submit at least two pieces of music as coursework Eg a piece for their own instrument and a pop song (15 each) based on two different areas of study There will be opportunities to learn to use music technology software including Cubase and Sibelius
Paper 3 AppraisingStudents develop their listening and appraising skills through the study of music across a variety of styles and genres The content for this unit is grouped into four areas of study each of which contain 3 set works The Areas of Study are Instrumental music from 1700 ndash 1820 Vocal Music Music for Stage and Screen and Fusions In this exam students are expected to answer questions responding to extracts of music on a CD which are taken from the set works and answer questions in more depth using correct musical vocabulary There will also be a question on an unfamiliar piece with questions on its musical elements musical contexts and musical language (Appraising exam ndash 40)
The whole specification including a list of all the set works is available to download from the Edexcel GCSE music website httpqualificationspearsoncomenqualificationsedexcel-gcsesmusic-2016html
Who should study this courseStudents who have enjoyed Music at Key Stage 3 or outside school and are interested in developing their musical skills further It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of notation and reading music in order to take this course although that is an advantage However as practical work is worth 60 of this course candidates will be expected to be able to perform at some level on a musical instrument (this could be a keyboard guitar or orchestral instrument) or sing This appraising exam is substantial and requires students to learn a wide range of musical vocabulary and features of different styles of music There are also opportunities to develop music technology skills during the course and students considering a future in Music Technology should study GCSE Music
Progression routesGCSE Music is a good preparation for further musical study and a solid foundation for AS rsquoArsquo Levels in Music and Music Technology It could also lead onto a BTEC diploma (in Music Popular Music and Music Technology) or an lsquoArsquo Level in Performing Arts Alternatively students may wish to go into a job where it is useful to have had experience of music or where they might need to use some of the skills developed during this course These might include careers in the music industry publishing entertainment teaching or any job which involves communication and expressive skills
Expressive Arts Music
23
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr J Enright
Content of CourseThe GCSE Drama syllabus enables students to explore themes situations texts etc using drama techniques skills and conventions Students are encouraged to think about their own and othersrsquo work through the process of improvisation rehearsal performance evaluation
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
The course is assessed in three parts
Com
pone
nt 1
40
of G
CSE
Whatrsquos assessed Knowledge and understanding of drama and theatre Study of one set play from a choice of six Analysis and evaluation of the work of live theatre
How itrsquos assessed Written exam 1 hour and 45 minutes | Open book | (80 marks)Questions Section A multiple choice | (4 marks)
Section B four questions on a given extract from the set play chosen | (46 marks)Section C one two part question (from a choice) on the work of theatre makers in a single live theatre production | (30 marks)
Com
pone
nt 2
40
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Process of creating devised drama
Performance of devised drama (students may contribute as performer or designer)Analysis and evaluation of own work
How itrsquos assessed Devising log | (60 marks)Devised performance | (20 marks)This component is marked by teachers and moderated by AQA
Com
pone
nt 3
20
of G
CSE Whatrsquos assessed Performance of two extracts from one play (students may contribute as performer
or designer)Free choice of play but it must contrast with the set play chosen for Component 1
How itrsquos assessed Performance of Extract 1 amp Extract 2 | (25 marks each)This component is marked by AQA
Who should study this courseDrama is an exciting creative and challenging course Over the two years you will gain an understanding of a range of Drama and Theatre experiences You will have the opportunity to choose acting directing technical or design Controlled Assessment options and work with a variety of well motivated people
Drama enhances personal communication presentation and leadership skills and self confidence You will develop self and group awareness imaginative creative and social skills These are invaluable life skills which will help you both in the workplace but also in your personal relationships
Students opting for this course should have a high level of commitment to group work and be prepared when necessary to give up occasional lunch times
Progression routesAt the end of the course students can expect to have developed skills in communication organisation team work and presentation ndash skills which are not just an integral part of acting but are also essential in all areas of life and work This course is extremely useful for those considering careers in the media marketing personnel and of course the theatre
Expressive Arts Drama
24
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs C Hammond
Content of CourseStudents who choose to study GCSE Physical Education usually do so because of a keen interest in sport and are involved in playing and training regularly within or beyond school
The GCSE PE course has both practical (40) and theoretical (60) elements to it and is examined at the end of Year 11
AssessmentContent Overview Assessment OverviewApplied anatomy and physiologyPhysical training
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Socio-cultural influencesSports psychologyHealth fitness and well-being
60 marks1 hour written paper
30 of total GCSE
Practical activity assessment
Evaluating and Analysing Performance (AEP)
3 sports activities 1 from an individual sport1 from a team sport1 from either team or individual
Non-examined assessment
40 of total GCSE
The practical assessment is an internally assessed practical exam which will take place towards the end of the course (MarchApril time)
The analysis of performance section requires pupils to thoroughly analyse the skills tactics and physiological demands of one of their chosen sports and produce an action plan which aims to improve the quality and effectiveness of their performance
The theory element is examined through two one hour written papers This will examine a knowledge and understanding of physical factors affecting performance socio-cultural issues and sports psychology This is completed at the end of Year 11
Who should study this courseStudents who do well in this course are competent performers in at least 2 sporting activities performing regularly to a good club standard Unfortunately a strong sporting back ground only will not lead to great success on this course The demands of the new theoretical requirements mean students will also need a competent scientific and literacy background with a keen desire to peruse a further physical education academic pathway or sporting career
Progression routeslsquoArsquo Level PE
Expressive Arts PE
25
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseThe UK is a world leader in the creative digital industries such as the creation of visual effects for films and computer games This course will teach you to design and make effective digital products for others to use
Unit 1 Developing web products When your attention is captured by a web page advertising a competition promoting an event or launching a new product what makes you stop and look Donrsquot be fooled by technical wizardry It may have spectacular images eye-catching animation or attention-grabbing text but what makes it effective is the way the components work together
In this unit you will gain the knowledge and skills you need to produce attention grabbing web products using web authoring software multimedia assets and navigation features
Unit 2 Creative MultimediaDigital tools can be used to communicate information using any combination of text images sound video and interactive components such as buttons and hyperlinks Products that use these components at the same time such as websites animations presentations and games are multimedia
You will learn how to use the tools and techniques provided by multimedia authoring software to design and create effective multimedia products In some cases you will be able to use existing components but you will also need to know how to create new components yourself such as recording a sound or video taking a photograph
Finally you will learn how to combine all the components you have collected into a multimedia product and how to test it thoroughly making any necessary changes as a result of feedback You will demonstrate your ability to plan design build and test interactive multimedia products through your work on a major project set the by the exam board
AssessmentExamination Board Edexcel
Unit 1 Practical examination ndash this will be a 25 hour practical computer-based examinationUnit 2 Summative Project Brief ndash this will be a scenario set by the exam board with specific requirements students work to meet these requirements and present their results using an online e-portfolio
Who should study this courseThis course is aimed at students who wish to study the creative aspects of ICT This course will appeal to you if you have a keen interest in Information and Communication Technology enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your own life and experience want to study a course that is active and enjoyable Students taking this course will develop the wide variety of skills necessary for modern life
Progression routesThis course provides a broad and solid foundation for further study of various aspects of creative computing such as graphic design web design computer games design and interactive media
It is useful for those who wish to study related topics beyond GCSE eg AS amp A2 ICT Level 2 and 3 BTEC Diplomas in Creative Media Production or IT but not the lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science
Digital Applications
26
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs J Christou
Content of CourseComputing is of enormous importance to the economy and the role of Computer Science as a discipline itself and as an lsquounderpinningrsquo subject across science and engineering is growing rapidly
Computer technology continues to advance rapidly and the way that technology is consumed has also been changing at a fast pace over recent years The growth in the use of mobile devices and web-related technologies has exploded resulting in new challenges for employers and employees
This course will give you an understanding of key computing concepts and the fundamentals of programming You will learn about the following topics
1 Fundamentals of algorithms2 Programming3 Fundamentals of data representation4 Computer systems5 Fundamentals of computer networks
6 Fundamentals of cyber security7 Ethical legal and environmental impacts of
digital technology on wider society including issues of privacy
8 Aspects of software development
AssessmentExamination Board AQA
Paper 1 Computational thinking and problem solving 15 hr written exam on topics 1-4 40 of GCSE
Paper 2 Written assessment ndash this will be a 15 hr written exam which covers topics 3-7 40 of GCSE
Non-exam assessment 20 hours work A report on the development of a computer program designed written and tested by the student to solve a problem 20 of GCSE
Who should study this courseThis course will appeal to you if you are interested in how computers work and creating your own applications not just using them to complete a task You are a logical thinker and have an aptitude for solving mathematical problems This is an enjoyable but challenging subject so you will need to be an independent worker who is willing to work on a problem Students taking this course will develop a wide variety of skills necessary for the future
Progression routesThis qualification will provide excellent progression to lsquoArsquo Level Computer Science ICT vocational courses and on to degree level courses in the areas of computing engineering and science
Computer Science
27
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs B Smith-Appollis
Content of CourseThe aim of this course is to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of a range of business functions These include Business Planning Business Organisations Marketing Finance People in Business and Operations
The course is organised with three main modules
1 Setting up a Business this examines the issues concerning the setting up and operation of a business It encourages students to appreciate that businesses must operate within society and that this involves businesses engaging with a wide range of stakeholders who will hold different perspectives
2 Growing as a Business this unit builds upon the content of Unit 1 allowing students to study businesses as they grow and the issues that expansion raises It considers the methods of expansion and objectives of larger businesses in relation to smaller ones
3 Investigating Business this unit is a Controlled Assessment unit The work must be candidatesrsquo own individual response and must be produced under controlled conditions The exam board (AQA) will provide the school with pre-released materials which will require candidates to undertake a business investigation Students will be given time (5-8 hours) to research the chosen business This can be completed in groups however individuals must produce a final independent response to the tasks Students should spend up to three hours writing up their findings This will be completed independently under teacher supervision
AssessmentExamination Board OCR
Unit 1 lsquoSetting up a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 40 of GCSE
Unit 2 lsquoGrowing as a Businessrsquo Written paper (1hr) 60 marks 35 of GCSE
Unit 3 lsquoInvestigating Businessrsquo Controlled Assessment 40 marks 25 of GCSE
Who should study this courseStudents who want to set up their own businesses and are interested in finding out how businesses are organised and their function within society Teaching is very exciting and students who enjoy discussion work and enquiry-based learning will benefit from this course Students must also be prepared to research real-life business examples that can be applied in the classroom Students will be given the opportunity of visiting local businesses and interviewing local entrepreneurs ndash so if this is what will interest you then Business Studies is the course for you
Progression routesBusiness Studies is a generic course that can lead to further study in many areas of higher educationndash vocational or academic courses Some of the areas that are very relevant are Economics MarketingManagement Accounting and Human Resources
Business Studies
28
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mrs S Direk
Content of CourseThe Course consists of two compulsory core units and four optional specialist unitsUnit 1 rsquoHuman Lifespan Developmentrsquo will explore a set of life skills from infancy to later adulthood Students will identify how factors in a personrsquos life such as their level of income can both affect and promote their life chances This unit is externally assessed
Unit 2 lsquoHealth and Social Care Valuesrsquo enables the student to explore care values such as confidentiality dignity and respect and to demonstrate how they could be used within health and social care Students will also study the importance of meeting the needs of individual people This unit is internally assessed
The optional specialist units are likely to be Unit 4 lsquoSocial Influences on Health and Wellbeingrsquo will explore the impact of relationships and social factors on the health and wellbeing of individuals and how it will have an impact on the types of care and support required
Unit 5 lsquoPromoting Health and Well-Beingrsquo- being healthy can mean different things to different people Many injuries and diseases can be prevented if people make healthy lifestyle choices and know how to reduce the risks to their health
AssessmentThere are two assessment objectives for the GCSE in Health and Social Care These detail the knowledge skills and understanding that the student is required to demonstrate
Weighting of Each UnitWeighting Assessment
Unit 1 25 External assessmentThis unit is assessed through a 1 hour examination paper which has a total of 50 marks
Unit 2 75 Internal assessment by centre
Who should study this courseA student suitable for this course will Skills required and knowledge expectedbull have a keen interest in the health and social care services and
how they operatebull enjoy studying a subject that is relevant to your life and
experiencesbull want to find out more about health and social care through
personal investigationbull be interested in finding out about what affects healthbull want to study a course that is active and enjoyablebull want to move on to a related career or further education
bull basic proficiency in literacybull basic proficiency in numeracybull some aptitude for computersbull some motivation to work independently
Progression routesThe BTEC in Health and Social Care is a suitable foundation for further study within the sector The options open to you depend on the results achieved entry requirements and your own interests Your teacher will be able to help you decide on the next step If you wish to continue studying Health and Social Care in a vocational context you may consider a BTEC level 3 in Health and Social Care at a college of Further Education Alternatively you may wish to study further within our Social Science faculty at Sixth Form There are a large variety of higher education courses that are based around health and social care
Health amp Social Care
29
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Contact Mr J David
Content of CourseSociology offers the student an understanding of important aspects of society This course is divided into a number of topic areas
bull Studying Societybull Educationbull Familiesbull Crime amp Deviancebull Mass Mediabull Powerbull Social Inequality
AssessmentExamination Board GCSE Specification AQA 4192
Candidates sit two 1frac12 hour written papers at the end of Year 11
Unit 1 Studying Society Education amp FamiliesStudents answer all questions in all three sections
Unit 2 Crime amp Deviance Mass Media Power Social Inequality
Both papers offer a range of short and long answer written responses ranging from 1-12 marks Each paper is worth 50 of the final mark
Who should study this courseSociology will appeal to students who enjoy the study of society and of people and their behaviour It is an evidence based subject which means that it is not just about personal opinion but about the consideration of facts and research Students will take part in discussion debate group presentation and individual research Students are continually internally assessed through regular written assessments and timed exam style questions
Progression routesGCSE Sociology offers a solid foundation (although it is not essential) for those looking to study lsquoArsquo Level Sociology The skills of written communication analysis interpretation and evaluation are an essential part of a number of A2 subjects including Humanities Social Sciences and English
Any career that involves working with others such as teachers police officers and careers in the criminal justice system and law journalists and media related careers social services local government and voluntary sectors value Sociology as an academic discipline
Useful websitesAQA GCSE Sociology aqaorguksubjectssociologygcsespecification-4190
Sociology
30
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
lsquoI wan
t to l
earn
rsquo Cul
ture
Characteristics of the lsquoI want to learnrsquo cultureStudents should be
bull actively seeking information or further explanations
bull constructively questioning the purpose of a set task or lesson
bull able to concentrate and focus on the task at hand without reminders from a teacher
bull learning together as well as individually
bull have an understanding of the process of learning and be able to use a variety of techniquesstudy skills to efficiently and effectively use their time in school
bull learning in a variety of environments including group and class discussions silently listening to a teacher or other speaker practicals investigations using IT individual research completing book or work sheet exercises quiet reading partaking in physical activities and artistic expression
bull voluntarily participating in a wide range of extra curricular activities
bull regularly completing homework with proper thought adequate research and sufficient time spent on it
bull regularly meeting deadlines for the completion of work
bull properly using a learning organiser
bull properly equipped for learning
bull presenting their work well and with pride
bull demonstrating their respect for members of staff and other students by speaking politely and behaving in a manner appropriate to the environment
bull supportive towards each other and not engaging in any form of bullying disrespectful behaviour or physical violence
bull ensuring that their environment remains clean and tidy by not dropping litter or otherwise causing damage
bull regularly producing work and achieving success in line with the best of their ability
31
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH
Non
Exa
min
ed A
sses
smen
ts Non Examined Assessments amp HomeworkAs students move into Key Stage 4 they will be expected to become increasingly mature and responsible in how they approach their work The demands of GCSE are without doubt extensive and therefore it is vital that students are organised and keep up to date with what is expected of them
For the majority of subjects final GCSE grades will be awarded via assessment in exams most of which will now be taken at the end of Year 11 In a few subjects final grades will be awarded from internal assessment now known as Non Examined Assessments These Non Examined Assessments have replaced units of coursework but essentially are the same in outcome Students will need to plan in advance and for the most part complete the assessments in class
Homework will be an important feature for students as they prepare for their GCSErsquos Each subject will have its own distinctive approach to this challenge Some subjects will require traditional written exercises like essays in History for example to be completed Others like Product Design will require more practical tasks
For each subject taken students will be expected to spend the equivalent of about one hour per week working outside of normal lessons usually at home Students must try to use their time sensibly to plan and prepare for Non Examined Assessments
There are also numerous homework clubs that are organised by subject areas during both Year 10 and 11 and we will seek to guide and support students in their preparations For example if an assignment cannot be completed without the use of specialist equipment such as drawing boards computers or workshop facilities then we will ensure that work may be continued at school out of lesson time
We recommend that students use their homework diary every day to help them organise their workload Students will be given the dates of forthcoming assessments in class
The amount of work to be done can be daunting We hope that by students parents and teachers working together it will be both manageable and ultimately highly successful
Detention Any member of staff may detain students after school for unsatisfactory work or behaviour Students in Years 10-13 can be detained for up to 30 minutes without warning but can be detained for longer periods with prior written notice at least 24 hours in advance or parental consent
32
East Barnet SchoolChestnut GroveEast BarnetHertfordshireEN4 8PU
Tel 020 8344 2100Fax 020 8449 9862
enquirieseastbarnetschoolcomwwweastbarnetschoolcom
HeadteacherMr N Christou BSc NPQH